JP7168049B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there is a notification that a game state has been set in which a lottery is likely to be performed after the privilege game is executed.

JP 2012-217766 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention provides a first display for displaying first determination means capable of executing a first determination and first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means. means, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means is determined. a first dynamic display period determination means; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination; a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means; and second dynamic display means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the display period determination means and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means, a first privilege game is executed and a specific result is displayed on the second display means. When the second identification information for indicating the second determination result is displayed, it has a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game, and the second determination is executed rather than the first determination and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination, wherein the game machine comprises: the game state setting means; When the first game state is set by, based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information, the player is notified in an identifiable notification mode that the first game state has been set. When the first game state is set, a predetermined display mode capable of identifying that the first game state has been set is displayed more than the area where the notification mode is notified . It is configured to be displayable using a small display area .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, the first first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on one display means; and first dynamic display for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means period determination means, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information; and second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. , when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first privilege game is executed and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means and a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, and a first game that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination. and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination, and the game machine is configured to perform the first game by the game state setting means. When the state is set, the timing for notifying the player that the first game state has been set in an identifiable notification mode is determined based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. A display area smaller than the area in which the notification mode is notified is used for a predetermined display mode capable of identifying that the first game state has been set when the first game state is set. It is configured so that it can be displayed

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during probability variation in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the second special symbol is not changed after the first special symbol hit variation starts in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special design is a small hit during RUSH in a form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is fluctuating after the start of the winning fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special design stops variation during the hit variation of the 1st special design in a form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a RUSH in the first embodiment Inside, it is the figure which shows one example of the state where the result of the fluctuation display of the 1st special design becomes big hit C or big hit D. (a) is a diagram showing a card forgetting alert screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the card forgetting alert screen in the first embodiment. be. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per random number table, (c), It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd hit random number table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table; It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving/probability variable table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a latency/probability table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect selection table. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU in main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviating stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows small hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating status command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot-related processing performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing remaining number update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing temporary stop-related processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing variable restart processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing for special figures 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. 4 is a flow chart showing various counter updating processes executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rush entry command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device;

<First Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the exit 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 .

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 (37A, 37A, 37B) are provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. will be In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) determines whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), It is configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 or not. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 and a lower first ball entrance 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when referring to both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the term "first ball entrance 64" will simply be used.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state, the time saving state, or the normal state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable state. , indicating by the lighting state whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, a missing pattern, or a small winning pattern, or indicating the number of pending balls by the lighting state. , 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, a 15R short-time jackpot, and a 2R short-time jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a probability variable state, which is a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. There is, and "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variable state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpot. In addition, "15R time-saving jackpot" is a time-saving state, which is a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times ) It is a jackpot to be set, and “2R time saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of two rounds. .

In addition, the "special symbol high probability state" is a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, in other words, it is a game state that easily shifts to a special game state. The "normal symbol high probability state" is a state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a game state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released.

In addition, the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which "high probability state of normal design" is set not only increases the probability of winning the normal design (second design), but also lower first entrance 64b2. As the time during which the electric accessary 64a associated with is released, a longer time is set than in the game state (potential state, normal state) in which the "normal symbol low probability state" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 compared to when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win prizes. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 during the variable probability state or the time saving state, or in addition to changing the opening time, once A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessary 64a is opened by winning, compared to during the normal state. In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric accessory is hit once. At least one of the number of times 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with that in the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is used as a trigger (opportunity) to display the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern (decorative pattern) while synchronizing with the variable display, and a ball to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided which is composed of an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) with passage as a trigger.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

In this way, the decorative third pattern is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first pattern (special pattern) displayed on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, and the dynamic display of the third pattern is performed. By configuring the display mode to be notified to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified ( For example, even if the processing load of the main controller 110 is reduced by a blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated in units of 0.1 seconds, the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 For example, by variably setting the target display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), a dynamic display mode (the second Effect mode using 3 symbols) can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 .

The second pattern display device alternately lights up the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as normal symbols (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is It is configured to be in an activated state (activated to an open state) only for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (variable probability state, short time state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of the normal symbol as the game state. is set to be As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the high probability state of the normal symbols, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than in the low probability state of the normal symbols. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

Therefore, during the variable probability state and the time saving state, it can be set as a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state and when the time saving state is set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The same display mode is set as the background mode to be displayed on the screen to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the current game situation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. is configured to set the display mode of Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the current game state by the operation state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

In addition, during the variable probability state or the time reduction state, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set shorter than during the normal state during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, the probability may be constant regardless of the game state. Also, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessary 64a for one hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured to allow passage of a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols and high probability state of normal symbols), time saving state (special There are four game states: a low probability state of symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols) and a latent state (high probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols). And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, and another game state is set. By defining the period to be shorter than when it is set, the lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the first embodiment, in order to make the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable The first specific prize winning opening 65a of the prize winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds x 1 time, 0.2 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times). Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol, even if the player does not win the jackpot, he or she is given many chances to enter the ball into the first specific winning port 65a to win the prize ball. Better than lottery. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the result of the losing lottery in which the first specific prize winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win".

In the lottery of the second special pattern, the first specific prize winning port 65a is opened even in the case of a small win in addition to the big win, so that the prize ball can be obtained in a latent state in which the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is short. can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a latent definite state. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the variable probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous using the variable method). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a jackpot or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuation display will be the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during execution of a big win or a small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a win or a small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, the various configurations provided in the game area and the flow of balls shot toward the game area in the first embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of this embodiment is configured so that the game area is divided into a left area and a right area by a variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. .

In this embodiment, the shot ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operating handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate). A ball is fired with a moderate firing intensity. Therefore, the shot ball finally flows back through the shooting channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The foul ball flowing backwards passes through the starting position of the launch path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (not shown) flows down and is circulated to the top plate 17 . With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball with a desired launch intensity, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game is played. can be suppressed from interfering with

Next, when the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the left side area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (from 81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operating handle 51), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the right side area.

In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that it is possible to change the region where the ball flows down based on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so that the ball flows down the left side area. A game performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed instead of a game performed by adjustment (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, while the game state advantageous to the player is set, the player can keep the operating handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees). Therefore, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

Next, the left area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the normal state as the game state (low probability special symbol state: low probability normal symbol state), time-saving state (low probability special symbol state: high probability normal symbol state), variable state (Special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state), latent state (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state) is configured to be set. Also, a big win game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbols wins a big win and a small win game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbols wins a small win are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time-saving state, and the variable probability state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform a left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left region of the game board 13. A game method is guided to the player by using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81, and when the latent state is set, a right-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the left area of the game board 13. , the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player on the game method. In addition, during the big win game state or the small win game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before winning the winning.

As a guide method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or only when the game method is switched, after switching It may be configured to display the game method. In addition, of the left-handed game and the right-handed game, the game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time is set as the normal game, and when a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured such that the game method is always displayed as guidance, and the guidance display is not performed when the left-handed game is to be played.

As in the present embodiment, when there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one of the game methods. In other words, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player on the game method, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, the game method may be notified to the player by not displaying a specific display mode, or may be notified to the player using sound or a lamp.

A through gate 67 and a general prize winning opening 63 are arranged in the left area of the game board 13 . An upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side area can be entered. A lower first ball entrance 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the electric accessory 64a wins the normal pattern (second pattern) lottery. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which it is difficult (impossible) to hit the ball, to an open state (second state) in which it is easy (possible) to hit the ball into the lower first ball inlet 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the state where the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the variation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the jackpot game and the small hit game are executed When the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in the state where it is not done), the lottery of special figure 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 serves as a trigger for executing the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state where the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery cannot be newly executed (a state in which the variation of the special figure 1 has already been executed, or a jackpot game or a small hit game is being executed) When a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, there is storage means for storing the right of entry of the ball up to a predetermined number (4). ing.

Therefore, since the player can continue to play the game even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the storage means for storing the right to which the ball enters and the first special symbol.

80% of the balls that flow down the left side area in the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the balls (8 out of 100 balls) of the balls that are shot enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by structures such as a plurality of nails and windmills so as to form a sphere. Also, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first ball entrance A ball channel is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter 64b2. That is, the ball is difficult to enter in the order of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be

As described above, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player the privilege of paying out prize balls in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery for the first special symbol. It is constructed so that four prize balls are paid out to the player each time one ball enters. In this embodiment, the same number (four) of prize balls is given when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. However, without being limited to this, a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area of the game board 13 . The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that a lottery for the second special symbol is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. A spherical channel is formed by a nail. Here, balls that do not enter the second ball entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right area.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (fluctuation time) from the execution of the second special symbol lottery to the display of the lottery result is long. A variable time of time (10 minutes) is set, and when the latent state is set, a short variable time (1 second) is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but since a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is low. it gets really bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left-handed game and executes the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second ball entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and about 50% of the balls are fired in a right-handed game. is entered into the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state and the variable probability state are set as the game state, the state is a high-probability state of normal symbols, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of normal symbols for opening the electric accessary 64a, is provided only in the left area, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 more easily than in the normal state. It is configured to make the player play a left-handed game in order to enter the ball into the ball.

On the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to perform a right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to win a small prize (winning probability of about 1/2). When winning a small prize, the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small prize game, and 10 points are awarded for each ball that enters the first variable prize winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the latent certainty state is set as the game state, the player continues to execute the right-handed game to draw a second special symbol aiming at winning a small win, and a small win game, can be executed consecutively.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the bottom of the game area. The second variable prize winning device 650 operates to open the second specific prize winning port 650a so as to open the second specific prize winning port 650a so that the ball can win a prize by operating the rotating door 650f to the front side when a big win is won by the lottery of the special symbols. It is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that the ball that has flowed down in the left area due to the left-handed game and the ball that has flowed down in the right-side area due to the right-handed game can equally enter the ball. Therefore, when a jackpot game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continued, and the game method is given to the player. can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When the ball enters the above-described first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. ) is turned on, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a jackpot due to the turn-on of the first entrance switch, and the display corresponding to the drawing result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A. be

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a large winning lottery, and the first symbol display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second ball entrance 640 receives one ball when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings for paying out prize balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1. are the same (both four), and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (1) is different, but the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out in the case of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is set to 4, and the number of prize balls in the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2, thereby setting a normal state in which balls are difficult to enter. When the ball is in the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is increased, and the ball is easier to enter when a specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set. Even if balls enter the first ball entrance 64b2 frequently, the player may not receive an excessive number of prize balls. The number of prize balls in the ball entrance 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, a large privilege may be given to the player.

Also, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same number (for example, both are 5). individual).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (lottery of normal symbols) triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 64a is in an open state (allowed state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

As described above, during the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the variable display of the second symbol. , the symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) increases. Furthermore, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 than during the normal state.

As described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, that is, the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which a ball is likely to enter according to the set game state, A state (second state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball can be set. In other words, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery is executed), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same, and when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery of winning the jackpot with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) is executed. , When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) when the jackpot is won is set to be different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball (game method) of "left-handed (left-handed game)" and "right-handed" according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to "beating (right-handed game)". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a pass through the out opening 66 as shown in the figure. It is guided to the ball ejection path that does not. The out port 66 is arranged below the first lower ball entrance 64b2. In addition, although it is set as the structure which has one out port 66 in the game area|region in the 1st Embodiment of this invention, you may use the structures other than this and you may provide two or more plural out ports 66. FIG.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally concentrating the balls shot into the game area at one location (the location where the out ports 66 are arranged). Since it is eliminated, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various devices that constitute the game area. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an out port dedicated to the ball that has flowed down the left side area and an out port dedicated to the ball that has flowed down the right side area. Further, when a plurality of outlets are provided, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player that the ball entrance is the outlet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a situation in which no privilege is granted even though the ball enters the ball entrance (actually the exit opening) provided in the game area. be able to.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern (decorative pattern dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first pattern) is composed of nine types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of rear patterns imitating various animals with numbers "1" to "9" attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion. In this way, by making the third symbol a display mode in which the backward symbol and the number are associated and synthesized, the player can see the display mode of the backward symbol ( The type of the third pattern is roughly grasped by color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third pattern is stopped and displayed, the type of the third pattern is surely identified by identifying the number attached to the rear pattern. can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear design and the number forming the third design is not changed, but the combination of the rear design, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide a game that does not get tired of. Further, by setting the combination pattern of the rear design and numbers as the third design to be regularly varied according to, for example, the lottery result of the special design and the set game state, the third design can be obtained. It is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the game content based on the display mode (combination of backward symbols and numbers) to be stopped and displayed, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is completed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbols is configured so as to win a small hit, and when the lottery result of the special symbols is a small hit, the main symbols are in a specific combination (for example, "341"). is displayed. In this embodiment, the combination of the main symbols to be stop-displayed is changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery so that the player can easily understand the lottery result, but this is not the only option. Instead, for example, the same main symbol may be stop-displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win and when it is a small win.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side of the .

The main display area Dm displays upper, middle, and lower three pattern rows L1, L2, and L3. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from right to left) and displayed in a variable manner. is done. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a downward-sloping line and an upward-sloping line in the main display area Dm are set as valid lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, the third symbols are stop-displayed (determined display) on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when a combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this embodiment) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third pattern is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening performance) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, then after one second stop display (confirmed display), a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the held ball is displayed. is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special symbol is stopped (confirmed) for 1 second while there is no held ball, the stopped display of the third symbol continues. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. .

A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball is entered. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 . In this embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the first special symbol lottery is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of hits is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls whose variable display is currently reserved. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be reserved, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, in the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third pattern is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. is executed, and the display of the notice effect, the character, the number of pending balls, etc. is executed in the sub display area Ds, but in all game states, the There is no need to form each area shown in , for example, when making the player pay attention to the effect for suggesting whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds It may be configured to perform a powerful presentation by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance explaining the future game content is emphasized in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub By enlarging the display area of the display area Ds, an effect that is easy for the player to understand may be executed.

Furthermore, depending on the set game state and the effect mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of pending symbols and an area for executing the notice effect may be formed in the main display area Dm. A region for executing the variable display of the third pattern may be provided in the display region Ds.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbols and three parts of the sub symbols are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbols in the normal state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, three third symbols in a simple manner, each consisting of only one of the numerals "1" to "9", are varied and displayed. Also in this small area Dm1, a big win is started by stop-displaying three third symbols composed of the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically in the normal state and the variable state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed at the beginning of the game, and there is almost no opportunity for the lottery for the second special symbol to be executed.

Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each game state (in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol corresponds) is called the main variation, and in each game state The variable display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds) is called a secondary variation.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the variable probability state is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a long period of time (up to 10 minutes) The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the game state is changed from the probability variable state to the latent probability state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variation display to become a big hit to the end of the variation display and the start of the jackpot game), the second special symbol lottery It is configured to execute a game aiming for a small hit. Therefore, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the secondary variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbols imitating a bird's face are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the respective reserved balls, the reserved symbols enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the held ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be configured such that the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be suspended. Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the content of the variable display effect executed corresponding to the variable state of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Then, in the state in which the probability variable state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol jackpot is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, and the game state shifts from the variable probability state to the latent probability state. While this latent definite state is set, since the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, it is possible to execute many lotteries of the second special symbol. It will be a period that can be done (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent certainty state is set as the game state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls by frequently executing a small winning game executed when winning a game is established.

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in this embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that was elected to the jackpot in the variable state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give various benefits to the player. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol (special figure 2) wins a small hit and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period is interrupted), and when the small winning game ends, the interrupted measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, so regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period It is possible to provide the player with a constant special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) during fluctuation is displayed in a stop display mode indicating the loss. It is configured to forcibly stop at By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the contents of control with respect to the variation of the other special symbol are varied. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big win (lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the change of the other special symbol indicates that the lottery result is out. When the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the giving of the second privilege is finished (until the small winning game is finished), and restarted after the giving of the second privilege is finished. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, it is configured to execute the variation of the other special symbol as it is.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the contents of the lottery for the other special symbol (the result of the lottery and the period until the result of the lottery is displayed) based on the result of the lottery for one of the special symbols. A variety of playability can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the contents of control for the other special symbol variation are changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, if the lottery result is to give the player the most advantageous privilege (jackpot game), the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol during execution is the lottery result to give the privilege. Even if it is, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result will be lost, suppressing the awarding of excessive benefits to the player, and the lottery result (small win) that gives less benefits than the jackpot game. In the case of , without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol during execution, in order to prevent the grant of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game, the variable display is performed. Only the measurement of the period can be interrupted.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, a privilege that is not the most advantageous is given to the player, so that the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the game is not played, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes the player feel uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the variable probability state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the first special symbol. is stopped in a display mode indicating a big win, and the big win game is executed. Therefore, the big win game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small win game. A second game period is set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, as the content of the jackpot game, for example, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. The number of rounds display mode for showing the number, the winning amount display mode for showing the number of acquired balls, the type for suggesting the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game ends) Suggestion display mode, the number of jackpots won during the period in which the normal state is not set as the game state and the non-normal state (probability variable state, latent probability state, time saving state) is set (so-called consecutive chance number) ) and the like are displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5(a)), if the jackpot type this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) that sets the probability variable state as the game state after the jackpot game ends, FIG. As shown in 6(a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "entering the chance zone!!" indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during the period in which the variable probability state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not be displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set. A game state advantageous to the player (a game state more advantageous than the normal state) is set.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game can be easily understood. can provide.

Also, a comment "Aim for RUSH!!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to aim for setting the potential state. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, characters of "left-handed" are displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to play a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the variable probability state is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, can be used for both the ball fired by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side area) and the ball fired by the right-handed game. , are arranged at a position where a prize can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)), and the characters ("left shot", "right shot") displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, that is, , the game method to be guided during the big win game is configured to be varied according to the game state before the big win game is executed.

Specifically, the game state when winning the jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variable state) in which the left-handed game is guided, it is displayed as a guidance display during the jackpot. "Left-handed" is displayed, and when it is determined that the player is in a game state (latent state) in which a right-handed game is guided, "Right-handed" is displayed as a guidance display during the big win. As a result, when a big winning game is executed, it is possible to save the player from having to change the game method.

Also, in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6(a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, "777" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (ending screen displayed). is displayed. In addition, "-" is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

In the present embodiment, when the special symbol is not variably displayed even once after the power is turned on, the above-described non-variable display mode is displayed. By displaying this non-variation display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of special symbols).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the above-described non-variable display mode, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating deviation. Also, if it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display is executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the special figure 1 display area Dm1, the display displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 It may be configured to display by changing the mode to the initial display mode or the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. In the state where the variable probability state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5(b)), the game state is such that the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed by the left-handed game. In other words, the variable probability state is a state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during this variable probability state will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 6(b), the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is the variable probability state is displayed in the sub-display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left). be.

In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right). Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and a variable display indicating that the first special symbol is being varied is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It should be noted that, even at this time point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. , Non-varying display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the variable probability state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol in the variable probability state (result of judgment) Accordingly, the action display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol wins the jackpot during the variable probability state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6(b) is displayed, when the variable display for indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7(a) is executed. A screen appears. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display of winning the jackpot is started in the variable probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state shifts from the variable probability state to the latent probability state at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot during the variable probability state is started. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the game state shifts to an advantageous state (latent state) for the player, so the variation of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (the display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the game state has changed is displayed in a stopped state. be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has shifted from the variable definite state to the latent definite state due to the stopped display of the effect symbol 813 . In addition, in the present embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third pattern is used as the performance symbol display mode, the statically displayed performance symbol display mode is a display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as a mode.

This embodiment is configured so that it is possible to execute a large number of small winning games by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent certainty state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the potential state is set, "Right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate the right-handed game to the player. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Rush into RUSH!! Hit right" is displayed to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbols displayed in the main display area Dm are stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol that has won the big hit. Since it is constructed in this way, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the performance symbols.

Then, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed (during the variation of the big hit of the first special symbol), it is shown in FIG. 7(b). As you can see, an effect mode is displayed to indicate that a small win has been won. Here, with reference to FIG. 7(b), the display contents when the latent state is set will be described. FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the latent state.

According to FIG. 7(b), in the state where the latent state is set (during RUSH), when the second special symbol lottery is won in the small hit, the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. A variable display mode for suggesting that is fluctuating (during big hit fluctuation) is displayed, and a display mode "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. .

Then, a treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode during RUSH is opened, and a "V" for indicating a small win is displayed as an effect symbol 813 for indicating a game result from inside. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that a small hit is won with the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and that a small hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the first variable prize winning device 65 that rotates when a small win is won is provided in the right region, and the same game method (right hitting) as in the latent state can be played. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, even if the small winning game is frequently executed during the latent certainty state, the player only needs to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with a game that is easy to understand. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the latent probability state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent certainty state is set (based on the fact that the latent certainty state is set), the player is notified of the period during which the latent certainty state is set (Fig. 7 (a ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in a state where the variable probability state is set, the first special symbol is also the second Both of the special symbols may also fluctuate.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent certainty state (RUSH) has been set is displayed (see FIG. 7A) at the timing when the latent certainty state has been set, the currently changing second A lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent definite state until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem arises that the small winning game is not executed for a long time even during the RUSH state. There was fear.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is established (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable state), the second special symbol variation situation (whether or not there is a variation, fluctuation remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing of announcing that the RUSH state has been set is varied.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the conditions for transition to the latent state are satisfied (when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state), the second special symbol ( I will explain the content of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 5, when the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability variation state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability variation Rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state, a "super chance zone" with a higher degree of expectation that the RUSH state will be set is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8(a), the display contents of the display screen during the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing a case where a variation in which a big hit is won with the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the variable probability state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is This is a display mode showing a state that has not ended.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating "in the super chance zone" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a manner of moving faster than in FIG.

Then, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a "variation display mode" for showing that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a latent state is set. "Variable display mode" which is in the process of changing from a time before is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8 (a) is displayed until the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation executed across the timing of shifting the game state from the probability variable state to the latent probability state ends, When the special figure 2 variation ends (see FIG. 5(d)), a "RUSH" entry screen is displayed to inform the player that the game has entered "RUSH" (see FIG. 8(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8(b), the contents of the screen entered into "RUSH" via the "super chance zone" will be described. FIG. 8(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that enters "RUSH" via "super chance zone". As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the main display area Dm, a display pattern 813 is displayed from a treasure box 812 to inform the player that the game has entered "RUSH". Then, "Right shot" for guiding the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. At this time, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during the jackpot variation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows the deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, a game of frequently performing the lottery of the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game. is executed. In addition, although detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state in which one special symbol has won a jackpot (including during the jackpot fluctuation), it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured so that it does not exist. Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small win or a loss. And, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (approximately 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the small win is won with a probability of 1/2, and the game of acquiring the prize ball by the small win game continues until the big win variation of the first special symbol ends. In other words, even if the lottery for the second special pattern is executed frequently during the rush game, the jackpot variation period for the first special pattern is fully used because the lottery for the second special pattern does not win the jackpot. A rush game can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot variation in the first special symbol ends (see FIG. 5(f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9(a) and (b)). Here, the display screen when the rush game ends (when the special figure 1 jackpot variation stops) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b).

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a jackpot (jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. 9(b). [Fig. 16] Fig. 16 is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a player wins a jackpot (jackpot D (see Fig. 16(a))) that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), at the timing when the third symbol ("777") for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a performance pattern 813 (“super V”) indicating that the player has won a big win advantageous to the player from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment “Congratulations” is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. In this case, the guidance display area Dm3 displays the characters "right-handed", which is the same game method as in the latent state.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9(b), at the timing when the third symbol ("666") for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a performance pattern 813 (“Finished?”) indicating that the player has won a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment “Please return to left-handed hitting” is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. be done. In this case, in order to suggest to the player that the rush game has ended, the guidance display area Dm3 displays characters of "left-handed", which is the same game method as during the normal state.

9(b) shows the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, but when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, that is, the jackpot D However, when the game state set after the end of the big win is more advantageous to the player than the big win D, the same display screen is displayed, and when the big win game ends, the game is revived. It is constructed so as to execute an effect for performing a right-handed game as an effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the card forgetting warning screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow balls to be used in the game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins a lot of prize balls through a game, the player may forget to insert the card into the card unit and forget to remove the card at the end of the game. I had something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot game in which prize balls can be won). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player forgets to take the card. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a big winning game in which it is easy to obtain a winning ball and a big winning game in which it is difficult to win a winning ball, and furthermore, it is possible to set a game state in which a small winning game can be executed frequently in a short period of time. It is possible to set the timing of displaying the card forgetting warning screen according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen will be described. FIG. 10(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is used to display the operation of taking out the card from the card unit, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" is displayed. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10(b) to 10(d), the display timing of the card forgetting warning screen will be described. FIG. 10(b) shows that the first big win is "jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))", that is, the case where the player wins a big win that can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one big win game. FIG. 10(c) and FIG. 10(d) are timing charts showing display timings of card display (card forgetting warning display), and FIG. 10(c) and FIG. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting warning display) when the player wins a jackpot capable of awarding a large number of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), if the first jackpot (jackpot won when the normal state is set as the game state) is the jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls will be played during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display is executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d), when the first big win is the big win C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given during the big win, and the player cannot win. Since there is a possibility that the ball will be borrowed by using the card again, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big win (jackpot C).

In such a state, in this embodiment, the period from the first big win until the normal state is set again is set as an advantageous continuous period, and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous continuous period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is It is configured to execute card display under the card display execution condition that a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) has been reached.

In other words, after the end of the big win C, the small win game occurs continuously, and when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small win game. (See FIG. 10(c)) When the number of winning balls during the advantageous continuous period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of the jackpot C, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (see FIG. 10(d)).

<Regarding Transition of Game State in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing how to shift from one game state to another game state with respect to the four types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

First, a description will be given of how to transition to the game state when staying in the normal state. As described above, in the normal state, the frequency of drawing special symbols tends to be higher when playing the game with the left hand than when playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. This is because when the ball is hit left-handed, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the lottery for the first special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small win is not drawn. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state only when a big win is achieved. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the normal state ST1, when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a rate of 65% in total, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. It shifts to the definite variable state ST2 shown in . In addition, when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, when the jackpot D determined at a rate of 10% is reached, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. . On the other hand, if a jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot (normal state is looped). do).

In the normal state, the game is normally played aiming at the upper first ball entry hole 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second ball entry hole 640. Or, as a result of some of the left-handed balls entering the second ball entrance 640, there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol will result in a big win. In the present embodiment, there are three kinds of jackpot types (jackets E to G) as jackpot types set when the jackpot is won with the second special pattern, and the jackpot with the second special pattern is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F determined at a rate of 65% in total in the case are reached, the state shifts to the variable probability state ST2 after the jackpot is completed, and when the jackpot G is determined at a rate of 35%, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot is completed. is set again (loop normal state).

In this way, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (jackpot D). When the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big hit in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed. In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, since it is configured to set a variation pattern having a long time (10 minutes) variation time, when the game efficiency is left-handed game Therefore, it is possible to further increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery for the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the normal state.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the variable probability state. As described above, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand tends to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols rather than playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. becomes. In addition, in the definite variable state, the probability of a special symbol jackpot is increased compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent definite state. When the definite variable state ST2 is set, it shifts to the definite state SP1 with the winning of the jackpot of the first special symbol (the special figure 1 jackpot variation starts).

In addition, in the variable probability state, while aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 by hitting to the left as in the normal state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. will do. That is, during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes easier to execute the lottery for the first special symbol than in the normal state.

In the variable probability state constructed in this manner, a left-handed game is normally performed and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. There is also the possibility of winning a lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a rate of 65% in total when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol, the variable probability state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends, and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the big win G is reached, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big win is finished.

In other words, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, it is possible to shift to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, whereas the second special symbol lottery is executed. If you do, the possibility of transitioning to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the probability variable state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the latent state. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation time of the second special symbol is short, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, a right-handed hit is more advantageous for the player than a left-handed hit.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the variable probability state is set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won in the state where the variable probability state and the time saving state are set. (Second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the stage before the start of the jackpot game, that is, during the jackpot variation of special symbols, the latent definite state is established. When it is set and the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent certainty state is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the game state (potential state) most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can enjoy various games. can provide sexuality.

Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent definite state is set becomes the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation period, so the period in which the latent definite state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, an effect to be executed during the latent certainty state can be easily created in advance (at the time of setting the latent certainty state) in accordance with the period in which the latent certainty state is set.

In addition, when the jackpot C is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the variable probability state is set, the probability state can be set both before and after the jackpot game, so that the player can It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

Next, referring to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory are connected as a shaft. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main control unit 110 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). to run. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). A first winning type counter C2 used for , a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and each counter for a ball entering the second ball entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. Therefore, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a special symbol lottery period, such as when the special symbols are not being variably displayed or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for displaying the image are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, during a period in which the first special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is obtained and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), the prize balls (4 in this embodiment) are not obtained without acquiring each counter value. prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second ball entrance 640 during a period in which the second special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, each counter value and the like are not acquired, and only prize balls (two prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entrance 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3), More than 4 (eg, 8) may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not suspended, but similar to the first ball entrance 64, it is possible to hold and store the ball. may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 479. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is specified in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the game state is a low probability state of special symbols (normal state, time saving state), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Then, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is "7 or 8".

In addition, when the game state is a high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state) of special symbols, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a big win. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the total number of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, two values are defined as the values for determining the jackpot, so the low probability state of the special symbol The probability of winning a jackpot at this time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability is 1/80 when the special symbols are in a high probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG.15(b), small hit random number table 202b is demonstrated. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, the random number value for the small win is not specified. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, regardless of the game state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432". If it is within, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small winning, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is that at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the second The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 479. As shown in FIG. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 2, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 6, so the probability of a big win of a special symbol is "1/80".

Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 which becomes a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random numbers "212 to 432" are stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of small winning random numbers is 221, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol results in a big win, the big win type is selected based on the value of the first win type counter C2 and the big win type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)). becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A to C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 52), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In this variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern selection tables are set for each result of win/fail determination. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes a win for the normal symbol is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15(c).

FIG. 15(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 11 random numbers that are normal symbols in a low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) as a game state, and the range is "0 to 10". ”. Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number numbers to be a win is 11, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time-saving state), there are 232 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 231". Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of winning random numbers is 232, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "232/233". In this way, in the present embodiment, the random number value for winning the normal symbol is set to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. there is In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 in the case of winning the normal symbols are also high for the normal symbols with respect to the low probability state of the normal symbols. It is configured such that the probability state is more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2).

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, based on the value of this normal symbol variation type counter CS2, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern ) are defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 . The details of this normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device can be executed.

Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a large winning type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 16(a), details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the first hit A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16 (a), for the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", "jackpot A" is associated. are stipulated. This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are the "jackpot A", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100).

Then, when the "jackpot A" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reduction times of 10000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after the "jackpot A" ends, the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the latent definite state than in the definite state, and among the plurality of game states, It becomes a game state that is advantageous to

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 49" in association with "jackpot B". In this "jackpot B", the same jackpot game as the above-described "jackpot A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the jackpot that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). Game is set. After the end of the "jackpot B", the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF, and a different value is set to the time saving counter 203f according to the game state at the time of winning.

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "0", and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if "jackpot B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, whereas if "jackpot B" is won during the time-saving state , A time saving state (100 times) is set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are the "jackpot B", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot B" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds like "Jack A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of special symbols is not set after the jackpot. , a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than “jackpot A”.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 89" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" has two rounds, and is set to a jackpot game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is released. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in the small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is structured in such a way that the player cannot distinguish between the case of winning the "big win C" and the case of winning the "small win".

By configuring in this way, when a winning game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big winning game or the small winning game is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, it is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which small hit games can be executed frequently. The game is played while expecting that the winning game in which one attacker is released is a small winning game. In other words, by providing a game period in which the player does not want the situation in which the player's most desired jackpot game is normally executed, novel game characteristics can be provided.

After the end of the "jackpot C", the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a different value depending on the game state at the time of winning. When the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the time saving state and the probability variable state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. In other words, if you win the "jackpot C" in the state where the normal state is set, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot C" is won during the probability variable state or the time saving state. If you do, the latent definite state is set after the end of the jackpot.

In this way, in the game state when the big win is won, even if the same type of big win is made, the game state to be set after the big win is different, so that the player can simply aim to win the big win. Not only that, but also the game state that has been set can be made to pay attention, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the latent certainty state is set as the gaming state, it is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition that the special symbol jackpot fluctuation is started in the state where is doing. That is, the degree of expectation (probability) at which the probability state is set is made different according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. By constructing in this manner, the player is made to gradually increase the degree of expectation that a game state that is advantageous to the player is set according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 counter values become the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 40% (40/100). The "jackpot C" is one of the jackpot types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the game state when the jackpot is won, it is the only jackpot type that can set the potential state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state that is set after the jackpot ends, so it is set after the jackpot. In terms of the game state, this type of jackpot is more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" has two rounds, and a jackpot game (same as the "jackpot C") that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of the "jackpot D", the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF, and the value of "0" is set to the time reduction counter 203f. In other words, when the "jackpot C" is won, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Since this "jackpot D" has the same jackpot game content as the above-described "jackpot C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small win game. ing.

After the end of "jackpot D", since it is configured to set the normal state as described above, the variation display (jackpot variation) won in "jackpot D" in the state where the probability variable state is set When executed, the big winning game is executed after frequently performing the small winning game during the big winning variation, and then the normal state is set.

In other words, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the "jackpot D" is won in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state after the "jackpot D" in which the same release operation as the small hit game is set is completed. is set, the player can be made to think that the latent definite state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot D", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). The "jackpot D" is one of the jackpot types with fewer rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. becomes. Since the normal state is set after the end of the big win regardless of the game state when the big win is won, the game state to be set after the big win is also disadvantageous. That is, it becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special pattern 1). there is Among them, in the two jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”), a jackpot game is executed with the second attacker (second variable winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, as an opening target, In the other two jackpot types (“jackpot C” and “jackpot D”), a jackpot game is executed with the same first attacker (first variable prize winning device 65) as the opening target of the jackpot game.

That is, in the first embodiment, as special symbol jackpots, main jackpot games (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”) for the purpose of allowing the player to win prize balls and game states are varied. A sub-jackpot game (“jackpot C”, "jackpot D"), and so on.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is a game property that allows the player to win prize balls not by the jackpot game but by the small win game, it is set so that it is difficult to win a large amount of prize balls during the jackpot game. (Even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at varying the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player. can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbols, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is defined in association with "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is released. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the "jackpot E" is five, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100).

Then, when the "jackpot E" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the number of time reduction times of 10000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of the "jackpot E", the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot E" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the latent definite state than in the definite state, and among the plurality of game states, It becomes a game state that is advantageous to

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 64" in association with "jackpot F". The number of rounds of this "jackpot F" is two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable prize winning device 65) is released. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values become the "jackpot F". ratio is 60% (60/100).

Then, when the "jackpot F" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON), and the time saving number of times of 10000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the "jackpot F" ends, the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot F" is one of the jackpot types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the latent definite state than in the definite state, and among the plurality of game states, It becomes a game state that is advantageous to

"Big win G" is associated with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This "jackpot G" has two rounds, and is set to a jackpot game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is released. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values are the "jackpot G", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot G" is determined. ratio is 35% (35/100).

Then, when the "jackpot G" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the normal state is set at the end of the jackpot (the variable probability flag 203g is set to off), and the number of time reduction times of 0 is set. It is set (a value of 0 is set to the time saving counter 203f).

Since "jackpot G" is one of the jackpot types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the game state set after the big win is the normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big win. That is, it becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) And, the ratio of setting the variable probability flag 203g to ON after the end of the jackpot is 65% (65/100), but the ratio of setting 15 rounds as a jackpot game (50% for special figure 1 , special figure 2 is 5%), the ratio of the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the release target (special figure 1 is 50%, special figure 2 is 5%), game state at the time of jackpot winning is a time saving state, a probability variable state (that is, a high probability state of normal symbols) ratio of setting a value of 10000 to the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%) are configured differently.

In this way, by varying the contents of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot in accordance with the type of the special symbols won in the jackpot, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of game characteristics, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the contents described above are configured to be different according to the type of the special symbol. Good, other than the contents described above, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game (for example, 7 rounds) that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1, the number of rounds to be set is changed , You may comprise so that the ratio which sets the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be changed.

Also, on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (for example, an area through which the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine configured as above, the probability of the ball passing through the specific area may be made different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Also, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each game state set after the end of the big win may be configured to be different according to the type of the big win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(a), in this embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit is set to "10", the upper limit may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening action in the round game may be varied according to the type of the winning jackpot (or the type of special symbol winning the jackpot).

Next, with reference to FIG.16(b), the detail of the small hitting classification selection table 202e is demonstrated. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In this small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 93" in association with "small hit A". This "small win A" is a small win type that sets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) to an open state only once for 1.5 seconds during a small win game.

Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, the number of random numbers that become "small winning A" is 94, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small winning, "small winning A". is determined 94% (94/100).

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "94 to 98" in association with "small hit B". This "small hit B" is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small hit game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random numbers that become "small hit B", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B". is determined at a rate of 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during a small hit game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, there is one random number that becomes the ``small winning C'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, the ``small winning C'' is obtained. The proportion is 1% (1/100).

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines a random number that determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, a time saving/probability variation for determining the variation pattern in the time saving state and the probability variation state At least a table 202f2 and a latency table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latency state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. In each table shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal table 202f1 is a table referred to when the game state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 is a random number (variation type A counter value of the counter value CS1) is defined.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", Super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", Super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198" C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost and this normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) Correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies accordingly. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of "0 to 70". A deviation pattern (12 seconds) is associated, and a deviation normal reach (20 seconds) in the range of "71 to 150" is associated. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "151 to 170" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "171 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to a short deviation (8 seconds) variation pattern in the range of "0 to 70". Attached, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of long outliers (12 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 130", and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "131 to 170". ing. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "171 to 185" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "185 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is more than the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

Thus, when the number of held balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of held balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of held balls is small, it is possible to secure the time for accumulating the held balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is large, the variation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate the held balls. can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, when right-handed hitting is performed in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 600 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely worse than left-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to Drawing 19 (a), the details of table 202f2 for time saving and probability variation are explained. This time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is a table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state of normal symbols (that is, time saving state or probability variation state) is set as a game state.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), this time reduction/probability variation table 202f2 is for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and the type of stop of the special symbol (result of judgment). A random value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) is defined. In addition, unlike the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 is configured so that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. is doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the game is performed aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game, so it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol, There is a possibility that a period during which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game because the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time in the normal state.

On the other hand, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19(a) performs a left-handed game and is in a time saving state or a probability variable state in which a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the lower first ball entrance 64b2. A referenced data table. Since the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened during this time-saving state and variable probability state, it becomes a game state in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily accumulated.

In this way, when the game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, it fluctuates when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, similar to the normal table 202f1 described above. If a configuration that facilitates selection of a variation pattern with a long time is added, the game is rested and the first special symbol (special figure 1) variation is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced. change time becomes long, and it becomes difficult to efficiently play the game during the time-saving state and the probability-variable state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which it is possible to easily accumulate the reserved ball of the first special symbol, that is, the variation pattern table (time saving, Probable variation table 202f2) is changed so that the variation pattern selected by the number of retained balls of the first special symbol does not differ (when the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is small, the variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected) ). As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time-saving state and the variable probability state.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to move to Specifically, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed while the probability variation state is set, and when the lottery result (whether determination result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 When the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the game state becomes a latent state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the winning special variation ends, special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 is stop-displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot, and a jackpot game is started.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute the lottery and the variation display at the same time, while the latent state is set (special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed), a lottery for the second special symbol can be made. In addition, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display period (fluctuation time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol It is configured to win a small prize. By configuring in this way, while the latent state is set (while the hit special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently performed, so that the player can can win many prizes.

As described above in FIG. 19(a), in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, 60 seconds to 600 It is configured so that the fluctuation time in seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the continuation period of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of the special symbol, not only the result of whether or not the jackpot was won (whether or not determination result) but also the selected variation pattern (variation time) can be made to attract the player's attention. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, a long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, a small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, in the time-saving state and the probability variable state, right-handed hitting is performed, and when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 60 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely higher than left-handed hitting. Getting worse. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right during the time saving state and the probability variable state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, the details of the latency table 202f3 will be described. This latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), this concealment table 202f3 is random for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and the type of stop of the special symbol (result of judgment). A numerical value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined. It should be noted that the table 202f3 for latent certainty is configured so that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of held balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the table 202f2 for time saving/probability variation described above.

This latent confirmation table 202f3 is used when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period when the special figure 1 jackpot variation is executed during the probability variation state, and during the time saving state and the probability variation state At the time of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) to be executed after winning the jackpot which is the jackpot type of "jackpot C" and finishing the jackpot game Referenced.

This latent surety table 202f3 is selected when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit against the contents specified in the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19(a). The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 specified for each variation pattern is different, and the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different, Other than that, they are identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit is normal variation (60 seconds) are associated, the range of "40 to 119" is associated with super variation (180 seconds), and the range of "120 to 198" is associated with special variation (600 seconds).

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery is lost and this confirmation table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d ), and, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-intermediate variation (30 seconds) is associated.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the concealment table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take is associated with the hit short variation (1 second). When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the out short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, many lotteries (fluctuations) of the second special symbol can be executed during the latent certainty state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal pattern variation pattern when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in this normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of values of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for each game state at the time when the normal pattern lottery is executed and are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the game state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, a low probability state of normal symbols, the whole range of possible values of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the game state is a probability variable state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal figure variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state, a probability variable state, that is, a high probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 varies in the range of "0 to 198" with a variation time of 3 seconds. A pattern is associated.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the configuration is such that a plurality of variation patterns are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal pattern may have variations, and when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the latent probability state, the variation time is 1 second or 3 seconds. Any one of the types may be set, and the variable time is not limited to two types, and more variable times may be configured to be selectable. The more variations are given to the variation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that the player can be made to continuously hit the right hand more reliably during the latent definite state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is also possible to use a configuration that changes the variation time based on the number of times of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration that sets the variation time of normal symbols by a method combining the above-described various configurations. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the game state shifts to the latent state, and after that (for example , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time.

In this way, by measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, and selecting and executing the variation time corresponding to the measurement result. , During the period in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, it is possible to play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation so that more advantageous variation time (for example, short variation time) is often executed. can.

In addition, during the period when the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbols based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbols is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. You can continuously hit right. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol is changed. It is preferable to configure such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of pending memories of the lottery is smaller.

Further, when setting the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable that the larger the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, the longer the variation time is likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to make it difficult for the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to easily accumulate the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to increase the number of balls per unit time. Normal pattern lottery frequency can be made uniform.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 variation time counter 203m, special figure 2 variation Time counter 203n, jackpot middle flag 203o, small hit middle flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, general figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, It has at least another memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). The area stores the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the small per type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (reservation first area ~ Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b, like the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected is stored.

Like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area (normal symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. A shift process is performed to pack the winning data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47 S1705). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the holding of the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of pitches, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203e counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of variable display is held in normal symbols) is initially set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of variable display reserved balls. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the 2 through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49: No).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. After the end of the big win, a value corresponding to the winning big win type is set in the time saving counter 203f. Then, the time-saving counter 203f is decremented by one in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). If the value of the time saving counter 203f is equal to or greater than 1 when the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, it is determined that the time saving state for the normal pattern is selected, and the judgment for the normal pattern is executed by referring to the table for the high probability time. . On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the symbol is normal, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the table for low probability.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of special symbols is set, and indicates that the special symbols are in a high probability state when set to ON. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, as the gaming state, probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

This variable probability flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot that sets a variable probability state or a latent probability state after the end of the jackpot (S2402 in FIG. 54: Yes) (Fig. 54, S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special design is set based on the special design jackpot winning, and the special design high probability state is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special symbol high probability end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state, special symbols after the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state) is set When the number of fluctuations (number of special figure fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it may be configured to set the probability variation flag 203g to OFF. In this case, in order to plan the timing to set the probability variation flag 203g off, storage means for pre-storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition, and after the special figure high probability state is set Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end discrimination for determining whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means It is sufficient to provide means and .

In addition, a plurality of special figure high probability end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high probability state, fluctuation of the second special symbol Special figure 2 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of times, lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the special pattern is a predetermined lottery result (for example, lottery result that wins a small hit). It may be configured to facilitate the special figure high probability end condition and set the probability variation flag 203g to off when any special figure high probability end condition is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the first ball opening 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (see S407 in FIG. 34). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

With this special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the design is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the second ball opening 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. (see S1007 in FIG. 40). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

With this special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state "00H" is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203g is on), the winning state storage area 203j shows the probability variable state. "01H" is stored as information. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information to indicate.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big win (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). This small win flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1605 in FIG. 46). With this small hit flag 203k turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the counter that measures the variation time of the special symbol is (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small winning of the second special symbol is being executed, and the big winning is started during the small winning. can.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n are counters for timing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined according to the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in jackpot, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON when the start of jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF during the jackpot ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The flag 203p during a small hit is a flag which shows whether it is during a small hit. If the small hit flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in the middle of a small hit. This small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins a small win, and when a small win wins (when the small win middle flag 203p is set to ON), the second It is configured to interrupt the variable display of 1 special symbol. That is, among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the flag 203p during the small hit is set to ON. In this state, the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) never ends, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small winning game and play the game. In addition, during the small winning game, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the other special symbol and the start of the big winning game.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) by the stop symbol of the jackpot and when the jackpot is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, even if there is a new entry to the second entrance 640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is forced to stop in the off design (see S802 in FIG. 38), avoiding the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set to OFF (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal pattern (second pattern) was a short fluctuation (fluctuation for 3 seconds). It indicates that a short variation of symbol) has been executed. This normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the normal pattern fluctuation time in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is during the time saving state (during time saving) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes ), it is set to ON when the variation time (short variation) of 3 seconds is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has passed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S1818 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, if it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the current is in the time saving state (in time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48 ), when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (during time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48: Yes), the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (Fig. 48 S1822). In addition, the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal pattern fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, the game state at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when setting the variation time), and the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a after the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has passed Since it is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the game state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of game states (normal state and time saving state), it is possible to reliably prevent the electric accessory 64a from being released for a long time by the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed across the time reduction state), and a privilege advantageous to the player (long of the electric accessory 64a It is possible to suppress excessively providing the player with the release).

The prize winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won a prize (ball entered) into the first specific prize winning port 65a in the round of the small winning game. When the value of the prize winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit of 10, it is determined that the end condition for the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). It should be noted that even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10 in each round of the jackpot, the round is terminated when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of this prize winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a ball entering the first specific prize winning port 65a is detected during the small winning round validity period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed description is omitted, the winning counter 203u described above counts not only the small winning game but also the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big winning game. It is also used for small winning games, and is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the round (the number of winning prizes reaches 10) is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific prize winning port 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game contents of the small winning game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winning prizes is set to 10. is doing. That is, until 10 balls are won in the first specific winning hole 65a during the small winning game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied), the effective period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses. It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small winning game can be made constant, the production that spans the small winning game (the period from the start of the fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of the fluctuation of the other special symbol via the small winning game It is possible to predetermine the performance period of a series of performances to be executed. Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbols and the performance execution timing can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), special symbol variation processing ( 32) (S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 37) (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the small winning can be won, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small winning is the first special symbol. Although it is only the pattern, if it is configured so that the lottery of the first special pattern can also win a small hit, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special pattern. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a jackpot, based on the fact that one of the special symbols has stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of the jackpot game ), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol by being out, and when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, the combination indicating the small hit stops the one special symbol. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game is finished).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other (lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed and the big win is erased by the small win.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transitions shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the details of the electrical configuration of audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19(a), when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol in a state where the probability variation state is set, the variation time is 60 seconds per normal variation, variation The main controller 110 outputs a variation pattern command corresponding to either a winning super variation with a time of 180 seconds or a special variation with a variation time of 600 seconds. (Information indicating ) will be set.

Here, as a variable effect corresponding to the special change (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second stage is performed in the period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A staged production mode (for example, a production for defeating the second enemy) is executed, and a variable production for executing a third stage production mode (production for defeating the third enemy) is set for a period of 180 to 600 seconds. As a variable production corresponding to the fluctuation (180 seconds), the first stage production mode (for example, the production of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage production mode is performed in the period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. (For example, the effect of being defeated by the second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds are the first stage effect mode (for example, the first enemy A variable production is set to execute the production to be knocked down.

In this way, by setting the performance mode so as to put a break in the variable performance to be executed corresponding to the stage of the variable time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the variation pattern set this time for the player. It is possible to entertain the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while predicting which type is, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the case of executing the above-mentioned variable production, the remaining time display mode for letting the player grasp the remaining time for the production period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the production mode can shift to the next stage It may be configured to display an effect mode in which the remaining time is counted down). As a result, the player can grasp in advance at least the period in which the variable effect is continuously executed (the period in which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, there are multiple types of enemies that appear during the variable production, and depending on the type of enemy that has appeared, the degree of expectation that the variable production will move to the next stage (the rate at which the production mode that wins over the enemy is selected), , it is preferable to be able to suggest the content of the jackpot game to be executed after the end of the current variation display and the game state to be set after the jackpot game is finished.

In addition, in this case, for example, when Enemy A is displayed as the type of enemy, if the variation pattern set this time is a winning super variation (180 seconds), the type of jackpot most advantageous to the player is If the variation pattern is a winning special variation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a type other than the jackpot type most advantageous to the player has been selected. By configuring in this way, the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect can be determined by combining a plurality of elements for determining whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent state is set as the game state, and a period (hereinafter referred to as a rush period) in which a small winning game can be executed frequently by lottery of the second special symbol is set. 7 is a data table referred to when selecting a stop display mode (see FIGS. 7(a) and 8(b)) of a performance symbol for informing the player. This stop display mode selection table 222b is configured such that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game), and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the production pattern is set so that it can be done.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), the "jackpot A", which is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period is If the information stored in the area for storing the information indicating is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is within the range of "0 to 39". , the stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range "80 to 99" .

In addition, when the "jackpot A" is won, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "111" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 79", the stop display mode is "333". ” is defined, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "From 301 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "777" is defined, and "40 to 79 ", the stop display mode "777" is defined, and the range "80 to 99" defines the stop display mode "VVV".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the "jackpot B", which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (stores information indicating the length of the rush period). area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "222" is defined, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range "40-79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range "80-99".

In addition, the "jackpot B" is won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. If it is within 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "444" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 79", the stop display mode is "666". ” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (an area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "From 301 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "111" is defined, and "40 to 79 ", and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "jackpot C" or the most disadvantageous jackpot type "jackpot D" is elected, and the remaining If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, if the rush period is within 60 seconds, the obtained effect counter 223h In the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "444" is defined, in the range of "40 to 79", the stop display mode "666" is defined, In the range of "80 to 99", A stop display mode "444" is defined.

Also, "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" are won, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, , If the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 79", The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99" and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). If the information is "from 301 seconds", that is, if the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "333" is defined. , and the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the rush period, and the length of the rush period, and It is configured to suggest the content of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) to the player. As a result, the player can predict future game contents by grasping the stop display mode of the performance symbols.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the stop display mode of the production pattern has a predetermined rule. "777" and "VVV" are stipulated so that the number of benefits granted to the player increases (the rush period lengthens and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous) in that order. In this way, by giving a predetermined rule to the stop display mode of the performance symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the stop display mode of the performance symbols is selected by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the performance symbols is most advantageous to the player. Only when the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, it is specified to be selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, so when "111" is displayed, the player For the novel game property that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, the game property that normally desires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game feature in which a game result opposite to normal (a short rush period) is desired.

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the production pattern, it indicates that both the type of jackpot and the length of the rush period are most advantageous to the player, so that the player can You can play games with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the production pattern (the timing for stopping and displaying the production pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81) is determined by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state. configured to be different. Specifically, at the time when the latent state is set (at the time when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when the probability variable state is set), whether the second special symbol is fluctuating If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if the second special symbol lottery can be executed immediately after the latent state is set, the first special symbol jackpot variation It is configured to stop and display the production pattern based on the start.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when the probability variable state is set), That is, unless the variation display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is performed. The production pattern is stopped and displayed based on the timing when the is finished.

By constructing in this manner, the second special symbol lottery can be executed in a state in which the latent definite state is set immediately after the effect symbols are stopped and the rush period is started, so that the player feels uncomfortable. A game can be played during the latent state without giving.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set (at the time when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when the probability variable state is set), the second special symbol is fluctuating When it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is completed is determined, and when the determined result is within a predetermined time, the performance symbol is stopped and displayed. (Production indicating that the rush period has started) is configured not to be executed. As a result, the performance pattern is stopped and displayed, and although the start of the rush period (start of the rush game) is notified, the rush period ends if the small winning game is executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fact that the rush period (rush game) has started is configured to be displayed in a performance symbol similar to the third symbol. It is possible to make it seem as if a rush game was executed based on the stopped display of the symbols. Further, even when the length of the rush period is within the predetermined time and the performance symbols are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a great sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing to stop and display the effect symbol, the timing at which the first special symbol jackpot variation is started, or the second special being executed at the timing at which the latent state is set Although the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is stopped is used, the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, for example, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Analyze the winning information command indicating the winning information, and if it is determined in advance that the big hit change will be executed in the next change, immediately before the big hit change is executed (before the big hit change, the third symbol is stop-displayed), the production pattern may be stop-displayed. By constructing in this way, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

Thus, in the case of using the configuration in which the performance symbols are stopped and displayed before the execution of the big hit variation and the start of the rush game is notified, the second input is started from the timing when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball mouth 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable to configure so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit variation is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the fact that the production pattern is stopped and displayed, the second It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery for special symbols is executed and a period during which a rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting the effect mode (additional effect mode) when restarting the variable display of the first special symbol temporarily stopped by winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. The data table to be referred to is configured such that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7(b))) is selected according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after restart. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23(b).

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data contents are defined as follows, and the player predicts the remaining variation time (remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type. configured to obtain

Specifically, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99 ", the additional effect type "none" is defined, and the range "100 to 198" defines "additional effect A". Further, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of , and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". Then, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". , the additional effect type "additional effect B" is defined, and "additional effect C" is defined in the range of "100 to 198".

Here, when "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) displayed during the rush period is changed to a ragged display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Also, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure chest 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed in the normal display mode, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 is displayed in the normal display mode. A gorgeous display mode is also set. Further, when "none" is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

Note that the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23(b)) shown in the present embodiment shows an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated, but this is not the case. For example, when it is period B, "additional effect C" is set, and when it is period C, "additional effect A" or "none" is set with a small probability. Also good. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the complex game information combining the rush period and the jackpot type is played in the stop display mode of the effect symbols displayed at the timing when the rush game is started when the latent state is reached. game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period is provided to the player by an additional effect during the rush period. As a result, the player comprehensively discriminates between the stop display mode of the performance pattern executed as the composite game information and the performance mode of the additional performance, thereby making it possible to predict more detailed game contents.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22(b). FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, additional production counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining time short number of times area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 variable time counter 223n, remaining variable time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification completion flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display completion flag 223t, award ball counter 223u, power supply At least a disconnection flag 223y and another memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the first winning type counter C2 are obtained according to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, variation pattern) The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is being held up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted as a special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. are managed by type.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

Special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and special figure 2 variation start flag 223e receive the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and turned off when the variable display is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop classification selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223g receive the first special symbol stop classification command and the second special symbol stop classification command transmitted from the main control device 110 , respectively (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is added by 1 Updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. This state setting area 223j stores information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command every time a state command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, the state setting area 223j is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and whether it is a high probability state of a special design or not, whether it is a high probability state of a normal design, in order from the upper bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols and high probability state of normal symbols), and if it is "10B", latent It means that it is a certain state (high probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is in a normal state (a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state).

By updating the state setting area 223j according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113.

The remaining short time count area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining count of the high probability state of the normal symbol. This remaining short time number area 223k is updated to the number notified by the remaining short time number command output each time the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated in the main controller 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). Thereby, in synchronization with the value of the time saving counter 203f of the main control device 110, since it is possible to update the value stored in the remaining time saving number area 223k, the remaining time saving number grasped by the audio lamp control device 113, It can be matched with the actual number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110 .

Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n show the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69) Values are set, and 1 is subtracted from each value each time various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). In addition, after receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command from the main control device 110, the period until receiving the special figure 1 resume command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, it is configured so as not to subtract 1 from the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m.

Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) executed when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60), when calculating the remaining variation time Reference is made (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining variation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the first special symbol jackpot variation. In the remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special The stored remaining period information is referred to when setting an additional effect for resuming the variable display of symbols.

The card notification completion flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) has been displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgetting warning screen is displayed. set.

The card notification flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not it is possible to display (notify) the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. is set to ON when the following conditions are met.

The rush display completion flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has started in the state where the latent state is set, and is a rush entry screen (FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has started. (a), see FIG. 8(b)) is set to ON.

The number of prize balls counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the start of the jackpot game, and the number of prize balls during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. Configured so that the numbers are cumulative. Specifically, in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), the value corresponding to the received prize command is added ( S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the small winning game as well as in the big winning game. It is configured to be able to execute the card forgetting warning display after the end of the winning game or after the end of the big winning game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, in the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then This is when the audio lamp controller 113 wakes up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 74(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1 is opened. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball is detected to have entered the ball entrance 64b2.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 shows the power on display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 25(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is detected. 25B and 25C, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. While the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when a ball is detected in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third The pattern display device 81 can be made to display immediately.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 26A and 26B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 26(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, for back face A corresponding to "town stage." . Also, FIG. 27 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 26, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is determined to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the rear surface E is the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 27(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 27(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is displayed again, and the back images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Further, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27(a), and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 27(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

27(a) to 27(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. 27(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27(b)-(c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 27(a) and (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27(b) to (c) and FIGS. 27(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 24). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the back face type, when specifying to display a back face image different from back faces A to E, information specifying which back face image is to be displayed is also described.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 30) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 75(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 30), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (Fig. 81(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82). It is set to OFF when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B, FIG. 79, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (in this embodiment 479, 99, 232, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process (S105), the process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and the process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and if it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the processing of this S202, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win. In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. Then (S203), that is, the processing for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special symbols for which subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing ends. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and then, the process proceeds to S209 for executing the variation processing regarding the special figure 2. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S205) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After finishing the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the processing of S206, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processing of S209-S213, the same processing as S204-S207 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0 (ie, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (S209), special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is greater than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1 ) is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S305 is completed, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Based on, based on the game state that is set, it is a process for executing the jackpot determination whether or not the jackpot.

When the process of S306 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is finished, next, the game state update process is executed (S308). Although this game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. This is a process for updating the When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S204 in FIG. 33) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the period during which the variation display (jackpot variation) indicating that one of the special symbols has won a big win is being executed, whether or not the other special symbol lottery has won a big win is displayed. It is configured not to judge.

In other words, in a state in which it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after the fluctuation time has passed) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is constructed so as to suppress giving a privilege excessively due to winning a jackpot.

In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the outlier symbol, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbols are in a high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random value that becomes the jackpot defined in the first per random number table 202a for high probability time and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer match, and obtains the determination result (lottery result) (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit ( S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special pattern (S407), and the lottery result of the first special pattern is set to jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the obtained win type counter, the first special symbol jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value corresponding to the current game status is stored in the winning status storage area. 203j (S410), 1 is set to the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this process is finished.

Here, by setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34) in the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) The high probability state of normal symbols can be shifted to the low probability state in the game state update process (S308) executed later. Thus, when a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbols, it is possible to set a low probability state of normal symbols at the timing when the big win variation is started. Therefore, it is possible to shift the probability variable state to the latent probability state by winning the jackpot in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variable state is set.

Also. By performing the processing of setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the processing of S411, the processing of shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state on the condition that the jackpot is won, and the fluctuation of the special design. Any of the process of shifting from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state under the condition that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times can be executed using the game state update process (S308). As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main controller 110 from becoming complicated even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high-probability state of the normal symbol are provided.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203h is ON (S405: Yes), or if it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S406 (S406: No), set the missing symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S412), and then terminate this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a jackpot of 1 special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34).

In the processing of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the processing of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the game state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The game state is determined based on the state of the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( S506).

When the processing of S506 is finished, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), then the first special symbol variation start is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the processing of S505 A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in is set to the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 36, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the state of the variable probability flag 203g which is the condition for setting the game state and the value of the time saving counter 203f, only the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), it is configured to execute the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f.

Then, the variable probability flag 203g, which is set to ON, which will be described in detail later, is set to OFF when the jackpot variation is finished and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, two conditional elements referred to when setting the gaming state (the state of the variable probability flag 203g, the value of the time-saving counter 203f), one conditional element is updated at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the other conditional elements can be updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the game state set by combining the two conditional elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state) only during the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the end, it is advantageous to the player only during the predetermined period. It is possible to set the game state.

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604), and if it is determined to be 0 (S604: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605) ). Here, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), it is a variable probability state (that is, a latent probability state) in which the time saving game is not given, so the latent probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S605, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is in the normal state, the state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this processing exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously until the next special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot). However, in addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided instead of the probability variation flag 203g, the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In some cases, the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed to the low probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. By providing a game state update process at the time of special figure fluctuation stop for updating the value of the probability variation counter, a process for determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 37, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205). In this first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203o is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON) special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed, it is in the midst of a jackpot in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the jackpot (or small hit) is not in progress in the processing of S201, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is the jackpot (or small hit) game It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description continues. In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S702), special figure 1 temporary The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and S704 to process.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is updated by subtracting 1 (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802), and the special figure Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s has been turned on (S803). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S804).

When the processing of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and probability variation flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S808.

In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped-displayed as a deviating symbol. is not limited to For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure. In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S806 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34). For example, using the opening period of the jackpot game, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). You may make it

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) performed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) performed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In this second special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the target of variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed descriptions of the elements are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S209), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to ON while stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the big hit variation of the first special symbol ends. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is ON in the process of S901, without executing each process of S902 to S907 for setting the start of fluctuation, this process is configured to end as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b data (various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed based on each counter value stored. Execute (S905). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S905 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S906). . Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 ends, the game state update process (see FIG. 36) described above is executed (S907), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) and The explanation will focus on the differences between the two.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the variable probability flag 203g. Each of these processes differs only in that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and when it is determined to be a jackpot (S1006: Yes), executes the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to the jackpot, and ends this processing. In each of these S1007 to S1010 processes, the same processes as those of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, if the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit When it is determined (S1006: No), special figure 2 loss variation processing for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or loss of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this process is terminated. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result When it is determined that it is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1103). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then, End this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S1202). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) The type is determined (S1204).

When the process of S1204 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then, based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process of S1208 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S1205 is set to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is ON (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)), the small hit type is selected (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1305). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S1306), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table (Fig. 17 and FIG. 19) is read (S1307), and from the read variation pattern selection table, an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1308). Then, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, to set the special Figure 2 variation pattern command (S1309), to end this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 Explain the content. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211). In this second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is updated (S1402), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S213). This 2nd special design fluctuation stop processing (S213) executes the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 big win flag 203i is set to ON. When it is determined (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203g and time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot medium flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the processing of S1509, to set the special figure 2 decision command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is decided and stopped (S1509). Thereafter, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S1508), S1509 and S1510 described above , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S1508), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 out stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, out), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution is executed.

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set (S1603).

After completing the processing of S1603, a small winning scenario based on the selected small winning type is set (S1604). After that, the small hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S1606).

When the processing of S1606 ends, a special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, stops variably as a small hit symbol (S1608), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. Set a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1609). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is stopped by the symbol (S1610), and the process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the starting winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winning) the first ball entrance (first starting opening) 64, and if the ball has entered (winning), the process is suspended. Up to the upper limit number (up to 4 in the first entrance 64), each counter value obtained is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a , a process of predicting the result of determination of suitability, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed in advance. The start winning process (S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, determination is made using the detection result of a first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 . When it is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702 ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A reserved pitch number command for notifying the reserved number to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1705). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, the winning information command including the predicted result of determination of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is finished.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, based on the information stored on hold, the winning/failure determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio ramp controller 113 . As a result, based on the hold-stored hit/fail judgment result, the display mode of the hold ball is changed (for example, the color of the hold ball is changed to a different color than usual) and displayed, or before the start of variation It is possible to execute an effect to suggest the result of winning/failing judgment to the player by displaying the notice pattern or the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower first entrance 64b2 It is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with .

In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S1801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2. Including while being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal design (second design) is hit (S1801: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal design variation (lottery), so that it is as it is. End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating). When it is determined (S1802) that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating) (S1802: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is hit at present, the normal symbol fluctuates. Among them, if it is determined that there is no state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), the value of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203e (suspension of variation display in normal symbols number of times M) is obtained (S1803).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1804), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S1804: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1805), and normal The data stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

In the process of S1806, the data stored in the normal design reservation first to fourth areas of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1st area → execution area, normal design reservation 2nd area → normal design reservation 1st area, normal design reservation 3rd area → normal design reservation 2nd area, normal design reservation 4th area → Shift the data in each area such as the third area for normal design reservation. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S1807).

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal design is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the hit of the normal design is normal. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a winning of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "232", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern.

Next, the lottery result of the normal design acquired by the process of S1808 determines whether it is a hit of the normal design (S1809), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design (S1809: Yes), hit time is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S1809: No), the display mode when out is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the processing of S1810 or S1812 ends, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols state) (S1811: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation time in the second pattern display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), then the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1814), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) (normal symbol low probability state) (S1811: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and the process ends.

It should be noted that the normal short fluctuation flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the game state at the timing when the lottery of normal symbols is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbols is stopped. It is referred to when setting the opening operation of the displayed electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a can be varied depending on which game state the variation (lottery) start timing of the normal symbol and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In this embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of normal pattern variation (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is winning, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is stored in the game condition storage means capable of always storing the currently set game condition. A storage area may be provided for temporary storage. Further, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the lottery of the normal symbols is performed. By doing so, it may be configured so that the game state at the timing when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed can be determined. In other words, it is only necessary to provide a storage means capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage means capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1816). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S1813, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1816, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S1816: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the processing of S1817, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1810, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to The period during which the second symbol is statically displayed is longer than the period during which one portion of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "X") indicating that the second symbol is being changed is illuminated. It is configured to be (determined display). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second symbol has been stop-displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 in FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

When the process of S1817 is finished, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (S106) However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a winning pattern (S1818: Yes), it is then determined whether the normal pattern short variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

In the processing of S1819, when it is determined that the normal short fluctuation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol is started If it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1819, if it is determined that the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal pattern is started It is determined that the game state is the time saving state If so (S1816: Yes), the normal figure short variation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state (in time saving) (S1821).

In the processing of S1821, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1 time is set (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing of starting the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol, and the current game state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a ) are both in a time-saving state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times (electric accessory 64a is set (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player. Variation) is executed and winning is won, and even if the time saving state is set until the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol ends, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. there is nothing In addition, similarly, in the variation (lottery) of the normal pattern executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winning is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the variation of the normal pattern stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous benefit (long release of the electric accessory 64a).

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the long opening of the electric accessory 64a in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of special symbols (second special symbols) advantageous to the player is likely to be executed. The duration can be limited during the time saving state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are determined, and the game state set at each timing is determined. Although the configuration described above is used as the configuration for setting the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, other configurations may be used.

For example, only when the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are in the normal state, the opening operation is disadvantageous to the player (S1824 in FIG. 48). (open operation set in S1822 in FIG. 48) is set (short open is set), and long open (open operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) is set in other states. By constructing in this way, a privilege (long open) advantageous to the player is provided even for the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the period before and after the time saving state which is the game state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the time-saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

Thus, while the time-saving state is set as the game state, compared with the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is very short from "10 seconds to 3 seconds", and further. , the opening period of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Become. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is terminated, so that the normal state is set during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, since it is configured so that the time saving state is set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied, the small game that is executed while the time saving state is set During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long period, and a plurality of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a, lower first ball entrance 64b2) becomes a specific period during which it becomes easier to enter the ball.

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. It is preferable that the balls enter two winning holes (V winning device 65a, lower first ball entering hole 64b2) during the small winning game. can be increased, and it becomes possible to provide more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description continues. In the process of S1820, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and the process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing of S1823, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S2206) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. Control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1824 or the processing of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of variable display is reserved in normal symbols) is obtained. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), normal 1 is added to the value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S1904).

When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to the fourth reserved area) (S1905), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous game state compared to the normal game state. .

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determined result of the normal game, the player can play the game without missing a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. It should be noted that, when the performance is performed using the preliminary determination result of such a general pattern, not only the production based on the result of the determination of the success or failure of the general pattern, but also the electric accessory 64a is opened when the general pattern is determined to be winning. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing of By doing so, in the normal game state, a game is played aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 64a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game board 13, it is possible to switch to a game (so-called right hitting) aiming at the right side of the game board 13 before the electric accessary 64a performs the opening operation, and the normal game state. Even so, there is an effect that the possibility of a ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105). S2105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S2110.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S2111, S2112).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S2111, S2112).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S2108). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the variable probability flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and the state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). After the process of S2115 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). A jackpot control process is executed (S2204). Details of this jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 and the second variable prize winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessary product opening/closing process (S2206), the opening/closing process of the electric accessary product 64a is executed. After that, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, a display control process of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") is executed by the second symbol display device (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing, and the second pattern display device A variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) is in a winning state, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201, and the above-described processes after S2201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2210: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and displayed as a variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S2209, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 50 has been executed, so the power-off process after S2213 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2213), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2214). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S2201). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S2201. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control processing (S2204) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 52). This is a process for opening or closing the opening (large open opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2301: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that a jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is time to start opening the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to

In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (start of the jackpot) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the processing of S2305, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), a jackpot action setting process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning port 650a during the jackpot is executed ( S2306), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that it is not the time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed has been met ( S2307). Here, in this embodiment, while the first specific prize winning port 65a or the second specific prize winning port 650a is open, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) in total win, or when the first When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is met. When it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the processing of S2308 sets the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open to be closed, End this process. Incidentally, the determination process from S2305 to S2307 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, if it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is not met (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is determined. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the ending command for big hits is set (S2310), and this process is completed. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2311, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S2311: Yes), a big win end process for setting the game state after the big win is completed is executed (S2312), and this process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot ending process (S2312), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2312).

In the jackpot ending process (S2312), first, based on the winning state storage area 203j, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current big win is a variable probability big win (a big win type in which the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON after the end of the big win game) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is made based on the type of jackpot set this time. In the processing of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot (S2402: No), the processing of S2403 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2404. As a result, a special symbol low probability state is set as the game state after the big win.

Next, the game state at the time of winning read out by the process of S2401 and the value corresponding to the jackpot type are set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "10000" in order to continue the high probability state of the normal pattern until the next jackpot, and "jackpot B" is set. is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to "100" in order to continue the high-probability state of the normal symbol until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

When the process of S2404 is completed, the flag 203o during the jackpot is set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, the jackpot type won this time and the game state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends. (Probability variation flag 203g, time saving counter 203f) are configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S2205).

In the small winning control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 deviating stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed, and it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown) is a small winning scenario It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the processing of S2505, when it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: Yes), small winning operation setting processing is executed (S2506), and this processing ends. Details of the small winning operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed is met (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined period of time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the processing of S2508 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed, and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not established (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small winning ending command is set (S2510), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the flag 203p during the small hit is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the small winning operation setting process (S2506), which is one process in the small winning control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506).

In the small winning operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of small winning rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set according to the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process in the small winning control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and to the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if winning for the specific winning hole 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203u is updated by adding 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit (5 in this embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in this embodiment) S2705: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the prize winning counter 203u is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning port 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small winning scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 58, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The state setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the processing of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. The details of this various counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, It is determined whether or not the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202) and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: No), whether the state command is received from the main controller 110 is determined (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. Details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. state) in the state setting area 223j.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the state command is not received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206) and received The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 69) , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (set the variable pattern command for the display of the first special symbol used).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4208). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4209), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 69) , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the processing of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved balls of variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4212), the process ends. In addition, since this embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in the process of S4212, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c Only updates are performed.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start When the reserved ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be matched with the value of the counter 203d.

Also, in the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4213). In the processing of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (special symbol lottery propriety, hit type, and variation pattern) is converted to winning information corresponding to The data is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received from the main controller (S4216). In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4216: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63. As a result of the lottery of the special symbols, the effect corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4218) is executed. Details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. A process for setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the processing of S4217, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. Details of the temporary stop related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the production (additional production) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4221), and this process ends. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment, the process for determining whether a state command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60) is performed. , It is configured before the processing (see S4205, S4208 in FIG. 60) for determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol is received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main controller 110, that is, during the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33) Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) is performed. Even if the state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, in the state where the variable probability state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is won, and when the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, it is said that the latent probability state is set. It is possible to easily set a variation effect (see FIG. 7(a)) corresponding to the variation pattern command that becomes a big hit variation in the determined state.

It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when configured to execute processing corresponding to the variation pattern command prior to the determination processing of the state command, from the variation pattern command corresponding to the above-described jackpot variation, probability variation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display corresponding to the received contents is set. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the variation display indicating that the latent definite state is set at the same time as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. Due to the delay in the variable display indicating that the latent certainty state has been set in this way, the timing of informing the player of the right-handed game is delayed, and the player feels uncomfortable. The problem arises that I will give

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the process of varying the game state after determining whether the big hit is successful (see S306 in FIG. 33) and setting the variation pattern (S307 in FIG. 33) While executing (game state update processing (S308 in FIG. 33)), the sound lamp control device 113 first executes the processing for determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then It is configured to set a variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed even though the potential state is set.

In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the receiving order of various commands output from the main control device 110, there is a need to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

In the stop class command reception process (S4202), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop class command is received, the special figure 1 stop class selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302), and this End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, the state command processing (S4204) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described below.

In this state command process (S4204), based on the state command output from the main controller 110, the current game state is set in the state setting area 223j. In addition, processing for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6(b))) for notifying the player that the latent state is set, and processing for setting the game state to the normal state In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command process (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). If it is determined that the game state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403). In the processing of S4403, if the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent certain state (S4403: Yes), the latent certainty notification effect for notifying entry into the latent certainty state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4402, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the processing of S4403, the received command indicates a transition to the latent state. If it is not a status command to indicate (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether or not the received command is a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). If it is determined that the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), and the card notified flag 223q and the card notified possible flag are cleared. 223s, the rush display completion flag 223t is set to OFF (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, and the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4216). In this win-related processing, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big win game or a small win game to be executed when a big win or a small win is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. When a big win or a small win is won, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls won during a winning game (big win game, small win game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated Based on the result, a process for displaying a card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

In the hit related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) is a jackpot related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the winning related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4502), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When a jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4603). If the round number command has been received (S4603: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), an ending command for display that does not include card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4607, if it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. (S4609). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), an ending command for display including card notification is set (S4610), and card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current big win type is neither big win A nor big win B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), the processing of S4610 to S4611 described above is executed, and this End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), game information (opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents (ending, the number of rounds), the process of whether or not to display the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

This card forgetting alert screen is displayed when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game). This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the condition that the number of prize balls obtained in the period from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuous advantageous period) reaches a predetermined amount is satisfied. It is configured to display a forgetting alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state, the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot A, When the jackpot B) is won, a card notification is executed to display a card forgetting warning screen at the end of the jackpot game, and when the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the card forgetting warning screen is displayed to the player who has not acquired the predetermined amount of prize balls, and the player can continue playing while borrowing balls. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot game, since it is possible to set a game state (potential state) in which it is easy to frequently execute the small winning game, by repeating the small winning game, the player can A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuous period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), execution is performed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting warning screen on the ending screen of the middle big winning game or the small winning game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgetting warning screen to the player at an appropriate timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to frequent display of the card forgetting warning screen. The method of displaying the forgetting card warning screen is not limited to the contents of this embodiment. exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting warning screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting alert screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting alert screen are already met), during the special symbol fluctuation period (for example, during the advantageous continuous period (when a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds or longer is selected), it is preferable to display a forgetting card warning screen.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the player's fixed concept that the card forgetting warning screen is displayed after the jackpot game is over. In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, the jackpot game may use the opening period of the small hit game to display the card forgetting alert screen.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description is continued. In the processing of S4501, when it is determined that the received command is not a big hit related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command is a small hit related command (S4503). When it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), a small hit related process (S4504) is executed and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). In the small winning related processing, processing is performed for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small winning game executed when the small winning is won. , processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the small hit related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hit related command received by the hit related process (S4216) received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S4703: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), an ending command for display that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( S4709), the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in a small winning game that does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgetting attention calling screen in one game, after winning a big win in the normal state, When the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous duration) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of won prize balls reaches 250), a small win It is configured to display the card forgetting warning screen even after the end of the game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgetting warning screen to the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description is continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a prize command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the received command is determined to be a winning ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the winning ball number counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification enable flag is set to ON (S4509), and the prize ball number command for display is set (S4510). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, it is determined that the number-of-balls counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If so (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal state has been set, and the value of the number-of-balls counter 223u is cleared. The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command received during the period (advantageous continuation period) is accumulated by the number of prize balls counter 223u. At the end of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) (at the timing of displaying the ending screen), a card forgetting warning screen is displayed according to the value of the winning ball counter 223u.

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is the jackpot C (a jackpot that makes it difficult to win a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). When winning a small win game during the advantageous continuation period, or winning a big win C again, etc., a card forgetting warning screen can be displayed.

Next, the remaining count update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the content of this remaining count update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. is received, a process of updating the contents set in the remaining time reduction number area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining time reduction number command is received from the main controller 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 67, the content of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), when the processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time in the case of receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command, the third symbol display device A process for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed at 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that it is not received (S4901: No), the variable restart process (S4902) is executed. Details of the variable restart processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes), the remaining variation time of the currently set variation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time calculated in the processing of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or longer) (S4904: No), then the remaining variation period is 2 seconds or longer and is longer than 15 seconds. It is determined whether it is less (S4906), and if it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating normal remaining variation time is stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o. is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4906, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), the remaining variation time information storage area 223o indicates that the remaining variation time is long. A period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute the production (additional production) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is for the period A to be selected, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is for the period C to be selected. The ratio may be configured to vary according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided into intervals of a predetermined period (eg, 30 seconds), and periods A to C may be allocated in order for each division. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining variation time. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the variable time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the content of the variable restart processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable restart processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) executes the process of setting the additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001), and if it is determined that it is not received (S5001: No), this process is terminated. . On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command has been received (S5001: Yes), then read the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o (S5002 ), the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, the additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted in the present embodiment, after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends, the special figure fluctuation resumes. During the period until the third pattern is displayed in a swinging manner, when the special figure fluctuation is resumed, an additional presentation corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart is performed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period discriminating means for discriminating a normal effect period during which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating means determines that the normal effect period has ended, the additional effect is executed. good too. By configuring in this way, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed continuously, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Also, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but during the error period, the additional effect is continuously executed. Alternatively, a shaking effect may be executed to display the third symbol in a swinging manner. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means discriminates that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5105 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent state (S5103). If the current gaming state is determined to be the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, details of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104). In this special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is a latent state, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the display of the first special symbol A process of setting a probability variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation display setting process (S5104), first, the reading of the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is executed (S5201), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the process of S5201 is sub special figure 1 The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is a value greater than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush entry command is set (S5204), and the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205 ). On the other hand, in the processing of S5203, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is greater than 0 (S5203: Yes), skip the processing of S5204 and S5205 described above, and proceed to processing of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the display latent probability variation pattern command for the first special symbol is set (S5206), and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description is continued. In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a latent state (S5103: No), the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command A variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

S5104 or the first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (see FIG. 59) of the main process (see FIG. 59) S4102) transmits to the display control device 114. FIG. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol The data corresponding to the first special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110 Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the processing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting processing (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. Figure 71 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation display setting processing (S5109).

In the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is read (S5301), and the read fluctuation A value corresponding to time is set to the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent state (S5303). If it is determined that the state is latent (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display completion flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display completion flag 223t is not ON (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, if it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush entry command is set (S5307), and the rush display completed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the display probability variation pattern command for the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display completion flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when setting the variable display of the first special symbol, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation period is the latent state When setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is fluctuating, and when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not fluctuating is configured to set a rush entry command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, at the timing when the target special figure 1 variation is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7(a)) that informs the player that the rush has occurred. is doing.

On the other hand, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that becomes the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is fluctuating, and the special figure If it is determined that 2 is fluctuating, a screen (see FIG. 6 (b)) indicating that the state is in the latent state is displayed without setting the rush rush command for display as the effect mode of the fluctuating display. configured to display.

As a result, when the display rush entry command is set, and the screen (see FIG. 7(a)) for informing the player that the rush has entered is displayed, when a right-handed game is played, immediately A lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in the latent definite state, and a game without discomfort can be provided to the player.

In addition, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation which is in the latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in the process of varying, and the special figure 2 is determined. When it is determined that is in fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation in fluctuation is forcibly terminated, and a new special figure 2 fluctuation may be configured to be executed.

In addition, the setting timing of the display rush entry command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the special figure 2 fluctuation is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and a game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable is provided. It is good if there is a configuration that allows For example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation in the fluctuation has ended at the timing when the latent state is set, it may be possible to set the display rush rush command, and the timing when the latent state is set Fluctuation It may be configured to determine the remaining time until the special figure 2 fluctuation in the end, and set the rush rush command for display when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right-handed game until the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640. Any time shorter than the period may be used, and the time may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13 .

Returning to FIG. 69, the description continues. The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, set the display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, even if the determination result is out. be done. If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

Next, various counter updating processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this various counter update processing (S4111). This various counter update processing (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one processing of the main processing (see FIG. This is the process of executing the update.

In various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped, and S5403 to process. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S5403). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 variable time counter 223m and the reading of the sub special figure 2 variable time counter 223n are executed (S5405), and from the value of the sub special figure 1 variable time counter 223m the sub special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are decremented by 1 (S5408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5403: No), S5404 to S5407 described above are skipped. , S5408 are executed, and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 74, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) can be simplified so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 29, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush entry command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display If there is a rush entry command (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the rush entry command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flow chart showing rush entry command processing. This rush entry command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the rush rush command processing, first, the rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the rush entry command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush entry command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command in the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect If there is a command (S6416: Yes), an additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. In this additional effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display additional effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the additional effect command process, first, the additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional effect command for display (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 75(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state in which one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, it may be configured such that the variable display is executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, and normal state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability of normal symbols state), time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols and high-probability state of normal symbols) and latent state (high-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) are provided. there is And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, and another game state is set. By defining the period to be shorter than when it is set, the lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with novel playability that makes the player expect that the potential state will be set.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big win, the first specific winning port 65a is opened even when the small win is achieved, thereby shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. In the state, the winning balls can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a latent definite state. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the variable probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous using the variable method). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a jackpot or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuation display will be the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during execution of a big win or a small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a win or a small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in a state in which the probability variable state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set , The high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state, and the game state shifts from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. While this latent definite state is set, since the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, it is possible to execute many lotteries of the second special symbol. It will be a period that can be done (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, since it is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent certainty state is set as the game state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) advantageous to a player who can obtain a lot of prize balls by frequently executing a small winning game executed when winning a game is established.

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in this embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that was elected to the jackpot in the variable state Since it is (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the big hit game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are continuously set, it is possible to continuously give various benefits to the player. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol (special figure 2) wins a small hit and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period is interrupted), and when the small winning game ends, the interrupted measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, so regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period It is possible to provide the player with a constant special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) during fluctuation is displayed in a stop display mode indicating the loss. It is configured to forcibly stop at By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the contents of control with respect to the variation of the other special symbol are varied. Specifically, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big win (lottery result that can give the first privilege to the player), the change of the other special symbol indicates that the lottery result is out. When the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the giving of the second privilege is finished (until the small winning game is finished), and restarted after the giving of the second privilege is finished. In addition, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is out, it is configured to execute the variation of the other special symbol as it is.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the contents of the lottery for the other special symbol (the result of the lottery and the period until the result of the lottery is displayed) based on the result of the lottery for one of the special symbols. A variety of playability can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the contents of control for the other special symbol variation are changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, if the lottery result is to give the player the most advantageous privilege (jackpot game), the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol during execution is the lottery result to give the privilege. Even if it is, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result will be lost, suppressing the awarding of excessive benefits to the player, and the lottery result (small win) that gives less benefits than the jackpot game. In the case of , without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol during execution, in order to prevent the grant of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game, the variable display is performed. Only the measurement of the period can be interrupted.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, a privilege that is not the most advantageous is given to the player, so that the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the game is not played, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes the player feel uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the variable probability state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the first special symbol. is stopped in a display mode indicating a big win, and the big win game is executed. Therefore, the big win game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small win game. A second game period is set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the latent probability state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent certainty state is set (based on the fact that the latent certainty state is set), the player is notified of the period during which the latent certainty state is set (Fig. 7 (a ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in a state where the variable probability state is set, the first special symbol is also the second Both of the special symbols may also fluctuate.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent certainty state (RUSH) has been set is displayed (see FIG. 7A) at the timing when the latent certainty state has been set, the currently changing second A lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent definite state until the special symbol stops fluctuating, and a problem arises that the small winning game is not executed for a long time even during the RUSH state. There was fear.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is established (when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable state), the second special symbol variation situation (whether or not there is a variation, fluctuation remaining period) is determined, and based on the determination result, the timing of announcing that the RUSH state has been set is varied.

Specifically, when the transition condition to the latent state is established, so as to notify that the RUSH state is set when it is determined that the variation of the new second special symbol is executable. Configure. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new second special symbol is not started to fluctuate and a small winning game is not executed even though it is notified that the RUSH state has been set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent definite state is established, the period from when the change of the new second special symbol can be executed until the latent definite state ends is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big winning game from being started without executing the small winning game despite the fact that the RUSH state has been set.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the big hit variation starts. A latent definite state is set, and when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the high probability state of the normal pattern is not shifted to the low probability state at the time when the big win variation is started. , It is configured to continue the definite variable state even during the big hit variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide different playability according to the type of special symbol.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal pattern is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Alternatively, only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the pattern to the low probability state.

Further, the number of winning jackpots is counted during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the normal pattern high probability state is shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the game state by .

In this embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state, the probability state is set during the period from the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts until the jackpot fluctuation ends. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on the prediction of winning the jackpot in the start winning process (see FIG. 47), the jackpot variation corresponding to the predicted prize information ends. It may be configured to set a latent definite state for a period (multiple fluctuation periods) until it is done.

In this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the state where the latent state is set, regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol during the latent state setting, always a constant variation pattern table (See FIG. 19(b)) is used, but not limited to this, for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) A determination means may be provided for determining whether or not the change has occurred, and the data table for selecting the variation pattern may be changed based on the determination result of the determination means.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the average of the fluctuation time is about 2 seconds. If the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average variation time is about 1 second. As a result, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is selected, more small winning games can be provided to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the latent probability state is set during the big hit fluctuation in the probability variable state, but besides this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit. It may be configured so that the latent probability state is set during the variable display in the case, and during the probability variable state, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times. It may be configured such that the potential state is set when the

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the normal game state. However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the player is operated by tilting left or right or front and back, or a lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means that can distinguish between them, or a wireless operating means that can distinguish that an operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each embodiment described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Feature A group> (Small hit possible during specific special figure fluctuation)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display means; a second determination means; a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a result of determination by the second determination means; When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game and a privilege game executing means for executing a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and the first determination is executed more than the second determination and a second game state that makes the game easier, and the game state setting means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine A1 characterized in that the first game state can be set during a target display period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which an advantageous gaming state is set that is advantageous to the player is changed by a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If the next win is won immediately by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous game state is set is shortened, and if the next win is not won immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is obtained. is set longer. Thus, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous game state is set to be provided to the player differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a game feature that gives a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player greatly differs. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the period during which the first determination is dynamically displayed can be set to the first game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed, so the length of the period in which the first game state is set can be preset. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A game machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first game state can be made more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game by desiring to set the first game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means a third ball entering means different from the means; a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the second ball entering means; and variable means that can be varied between two states, wherein the first determination means is based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The second determination means is configured to be capable of executing the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, and in the second gaming state, The game machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be more easily variable to the first state than the first game state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first game state than in the second game state. Therefore, in the state in which the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game in which the third ball-entering means is allowed to enter the ball, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .

In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, the probability that the first determination results in the determination of the specific first determination result can be set to a high probability higher than the normal time. A setting means is provided, and the game state setting means displays the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. A game machine A4 characterized in that the first game state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first game state is set based on the start, the process until the first game state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is set to have fewer privileges that can be given to the player than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second privilege game, the privilege that can be granted to the player is set smaller than in the first privilege game, so that the player is excessively rewarded during the period in which the first game state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the imparting.

<Feature B Group> (set game content and special 1 and special 2 at once)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; second determination means capable of executing the above; second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; and dynamic display of the second identification information on the second display means second dynamic display means for displaying; second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means is displayed, the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed in the gaming machine having the privilege game executing means for executing the second privilege game. Period determining means for determining a dynamic display period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means. and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which an advantageous gaming state is set that is advantageous to the player is changed by a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If the next win is won immediately by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous game state is set is shortened, and if the next win is not won immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is obtained. is set longer. Thus, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set to be provided to the player differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a game feature that gives a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player greatly differs. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine B1, the effect determination means determines the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. To provide a player with the enjoyment of predicting a future game based on the performance to be executed, since the performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information can be executed in association with the dynamic display period. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game contents of the first privilege game. Characterized game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game It is possible to predict the contents and Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine B1 or B2, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. A settable game state setting means is provided, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first game state is executed during the dynamic display period.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is It is possible to perform a game aiming at the second privilege game by using. Furthermore, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that the game can be played enthusiastically during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a normal first privilege game and a small first privilege game in which a smaller privilege is given to the player than the normal first privilege game and the first dynamic display period determining means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. , the effect determination means determines whether the first small privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means and the second period is determined by the period determination means, and the normal second period is determined by the privilege game execution means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the same mode of presentation is determined when one privilege game is executed and when the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the two elements for determining the content of the performance by the performance determining means are different combinations of advantages, the performance determining means determines the same aspect. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, the player can be made to predict a plurality of patterns of future game situations. Then, it is possible to gradually increase the accuracy of prediction according to the progress of the first game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of predicting the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A game machine B5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to inform the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic group C> (rush notification)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; second determination means capable of executing the above; second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; and dynamic display of the second identification information on the second display means second dynamic display means for displaying; second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means is displayed, and a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game, in a gaming machine having a first game state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination; and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the second game state notification timing determination means for determining notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, according to the result of the lottery, an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the privilege game until the next big win is won, and the player is notified that the game state has changed. A game machine has been proposed that executes an effect to play (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is configured so as to execute an effect for notifying that an advantageous gaming state has been set based on the establishment of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In spite of the fact that a new lottery cannot be executed, the fact that a game state has been set is notified to the player, causing discomfort to the player. was there. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed has been set can be determined based on the dynamic display state of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A game machine C2, wherein the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means, the information is notified based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time are combined to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine C2 has dynamic display determination means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first game state is set, and the notification timing determination means determines the dynamic display. When it is determined by the display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first game state is set. Game machine C3 to play.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination can be executed immediately after the first game state is set, the fact that the first game state has been set is immediately notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determining means terminates the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing at which the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the first game state is set, the setting of the first game state is not notified during the period in which the second determination cannot be performed, and the second determination becomes executable. In this case, it is notified that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the second determination cannot be executed despite being notified that the first game state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine C4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a period from the timing when the dynamic display of the second identification information ends until the first game state ends, based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. and a game machine C5, further comprising notification determination means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be executed during the first game state. When the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible not to inform the player that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the first game state ends in a short period of time even though the player is informed that the first game state has been set. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature D group> (Simultaneous fluctuation discards the jackpot, interrupts the small hit)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for a predetermined period of time, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means 2 display means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period; When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is played. In a gaming machine comprising privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game and second privilege game type setting means for setting the contents of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means may The second identification information can be dynamically displayed in a state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by 1 dynamic display means, and the specific second identification information is displayed by the second dynamic display means When the second identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means, for the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it has a stop control means for executing stop control.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that has a game feature (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotteries are executed at the same time. In the gaming machine having such game characteristics, when the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and other lottery games being executed are forced out. It has been proposed to terminate automatically (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-319221). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, regardless of the type of the privilege game, when the result of the lottery for executing the privilege game is stopped and displayed, the other lottery is forcibly missed and the stop display is performed. There is a problem that it makes people feel uncomfortable. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set the content of the stop control for the first dynamic display according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine D1, the stop control means performs forced stop control for stopping and displaying the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. and a temporary stop control for stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to set whether the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped depending on the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the awarding of an excessive privilege to the player, and the privilege game to which a large privilege is provided is discarded by executing the privilege game to which a small privilege is provided. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second bonus game type setting means can set a first bonus game type and a second bonus game type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game type. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special game type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means is terminated, and the specific first determination is performed. It has invalidation means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege game type setting means until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine D4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set, thereby preventing excessive privilege from being given to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first privilege type than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first privilege type is more likely to be set than the second privilege type, even if the second privilege game is played many times, it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of the privilege to the player. There is

<Other ideas 1> (Possible to set latent state before and after jackpot game)
first determination means capable of executing a first determination; first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and said first identification information on said first display means a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second determination means capable of executing the second determination; and a second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; , when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first privilege game is executed and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In a gaming machine having privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is made easier to execute than the first judgment. It has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means is a predetermined first game state. When the condition is satisfied, the first game state is set during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when a predetermined second condition is satisfied, the first privilege game is finished. The game machine E1 is characterized in that it sets the first game state later.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player during the period until the next big win is won after the privilege game ends according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the period during which an advantageous gaming state is set that is advantageous to the player is changed by a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If the next win is won immediately by the drawn lottery, the period in which the advantageous game state is set is shortened, and if the next win is not won immediately by the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is obtained. is set longer. Thus, there is a problem that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set to be provided to the player differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a game feature that gives a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player greatly differs. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first game state is set can be divided into before and after the first privilege game, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there is a system that notifies that a game state has been set in which a lottery is likely to be performed after execution of a privilege game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 includes first determination means capable of executing a first determination, and first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means. 1 display means, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means for a predetermined period, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, and the second determination means second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period; and the first display. When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the means, the first privilege game is executed, and the second display means for indicating the specific second determination result. 2 privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the identification information is displayed; and second privilege game type setting means for setting the contents of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents. the second dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; 2 When the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display means, based on the privilege contents set by the second privilege game type setting means, the It has stop control means for executing stop control for the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the stop control means causes the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means to display a determination result different from the specific first determination result. and a temporary stop control of stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied. and
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the second bonus game type setting means includes a first bonus game type and a second bonus game type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game type. A privilege type can be set, and the stop control means executes the forced stop control when the second privilege type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is, in the gaming machine of technical idea 3, executed by the first dynamic display means when the judgment result of the first judgment means is the specific first judgment result. Until the dynamic display is completed and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means sets the second It has invalidation means for invalidating the setting of the privilege type.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3 or 4, wherein the second privilege game type setting means selects the first privilege type and the A second privilege type is set, and it is easier to set the first privilege type than the second privilege type.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and the first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means for a predetermined period; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination; and a result of determination by the second determination means. second display means for displaying the second identification information for the second identification information; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means is displayed. a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when displayed; and a second privilege game type setting means for setting the contents of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents; The dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second dynamic display is performed. means, when the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed, based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means, the first dynamic It has stop control means for executing stop control with respect to the dynamic display by the display means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the stop control means performs forced stop control for stopping and displaying the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result; 1. Temporary stop control for stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second bonus game type setting means can set a first bonus game type and a second bonus game type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game type, and the stop control means is: When the second privilege type is set by the second privilege game type setting means, the forced stop control is executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means ends and the specific first determination result is displayed. It has invalidation means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege game type setting means until the first identification information for the purpose is displayed on the first display means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 3 or 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means. also makes it easy to set the first privilege type.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S306 First determination means S308 Game state setting means S504 First dynamic display period determination means S508 First dynamic display means S905 Second determination means S1205 Second dynamic display period determination means S1209 Second dynamic display means

Claims (1)

a first determination means capable of executing a first determination;
a first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means;
a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means;
a first dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means;
a second determination means capable of executing a second determination;
a second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means;
a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means;
a second dynamic display period determination means for determining a period in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means;
When the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first bonus game is executed and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine comprising privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for is displayed,
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. with
The game machine is
When the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the player can recognize that the first game state has been set based on the dynamic display of the second identification information. is configured to be able to determine the timing of notification in an appropriate notification mode,
When the first game state is set, a predetermined display mode capable of identifying that the first game state has been set can be displayed using a display area smaller than the area in which the notification mode is notified. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images